]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
Allow back-ends to be able to do custom validations on params.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALIDATE_PARAM
733
734 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
735 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
736 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
737 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
738 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
739 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
740
741 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
742 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
743 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
744 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
745 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
746 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
747 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
748
749 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
750 is 0.
751 @end defmac
752
753 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
754
755 @node Per-Function Data
756 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
757 @cindex per-function data
758 @cindex data structures
759
760 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
761 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
762 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
763 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
764 when another one comes along.
765
766 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
767 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
768 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
769 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
770 to their own specific data.
771
772 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
773 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
774 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
775 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
776
777 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
778 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
779 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
780 function, for level 0.
781
782 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
783 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
784 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
785 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
786 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
787 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
788 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
789 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
790 longer supported.
791
792 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
793 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
794 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
795 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
796 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
797 @end defmac
798
799 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
800 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
801 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
802 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
803 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
804 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
805
806 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
807 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
808 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
809 @end deftypevar
810
811 @node Storage Layout
812 @section Storage Layout
813 @cindex storage layout
814
815 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
816 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
817 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
818 @xref{Run-time Target}.
819
820 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
821 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
822 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
823 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
824 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
825 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
826 macro need not be a constant.
827
828 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
829 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
830 @end defmac
831
832 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
833 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
834 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
835 @end defmac
836
837 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
838 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
839 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
840 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
841 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
842 macro need not be a constant.
843 @end defmac
844
845 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
846 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
847 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
848 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
849 the order of words in memory.
850 @end defmac
851
852 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
853 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
854 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
855 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
856 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
857
858 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
859 multi-word integers.
860 @end defmac
861
862 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
863 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
864 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
865 @end defmac
866
867 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
868 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
869 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
870 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
871 @end defmac
872
873 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
874 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
875 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
876 @end defmac
877
878 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
879 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
880 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
881 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
882 @end defmac
883
884 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
885 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
886 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
887 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
888 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
889 @end defmac
890
891 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
892 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
893 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
894 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
895 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
896 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
897 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
898
899 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
900 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
901 @end defmac
902
903 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
904 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
905 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
906 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
907 scalar type.
908
909 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
910 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
911 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
912 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
913 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
914 counterparts.
915
916 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
917 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
918 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
919 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
920 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
921 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
922
923 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
924 @end defmac
925
926 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
927
928 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
929
930 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
931 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
932 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
933 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
934 size of an integer.
935 @end defmac
936
937 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
938 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
939 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
940 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
941 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
942 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
943 @end defmac
944
945 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
946 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
947 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
948 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
949 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
950 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
951 @end defmac
952
953 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
954 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
955 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
956 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
957 @end defmac
958
959 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
960 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
961 @end defmac
962
963 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
964 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
965 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
966 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
967 @end defmac
968
969 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
970
971 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
972 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
973 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
974 @end defmac
975
976 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
977 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
978 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
979 @end defmac
980
981 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
982 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
983 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
984 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
985 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
986 @end defmac
987
988 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
989 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
990 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
991 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
992 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
993 @end defmac
994
995 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
996 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
997 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
998 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
999 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
1000 field alignment has not been set by the
1001 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1002 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1003 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1004 @end defmac
1005
1006 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1007 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1008 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1009
1010 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1011
1012 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1013 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1014 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1015 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1016 @end defmac
1017
1018 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1019 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1020 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1021 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1022 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1023
1024 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1025 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1026 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1027 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1028 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1029 @end defmac
1030
1031 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1032
1033 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1034 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1035 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1036 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1037 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1038
1039 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1040
1041 @findex strcpy
1042 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1043 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1044 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1045 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1046 @end defmac
1047
1048 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1049 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1050 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1051 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1052 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1053
1054 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1055 @end defmac
1056
1057 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1058
1059 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1060 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1061 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1062 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1063 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1064
1065 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1066
1067 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1068 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1069
1070 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1071 @end defmac
1072
1073 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1074
1075 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1076 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1077 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1078 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1079 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1080 align the slot.
1081
1082 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1083 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1084 be used.
1085
1086 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1087 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1088
1089 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1090 @end defmac
1091
1092 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1093 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1094 variable @var{decl}.
1095
1096 If this macro is not defined, then
1097 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1098 is used.
1099
1100 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1101 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1102
1103 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1104 @end defmac
1105
1106 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1107 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1108 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1109 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1110
1111 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1112 @end defmac
1113
1114 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1115 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1116 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1117
1118 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1119 @end defmac
1120
1121 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1122 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1123 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1124
1125 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1126 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1127 @end defmac
1128
1129 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1130 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1131 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1132 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1133 @end defmac
1134
1135 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1136 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1137 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1138
1139 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1140 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1141 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1142 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1143 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1144
1145 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1146 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1147 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1148 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1149
1150 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1151 structure.
1152
1153 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1154 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1155
1156 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1157 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1158 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1159 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1160
1161 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1162 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1163 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1164
1165 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1166 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1167 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1168
1169 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1170 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1171 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1172
1173 @smallexample
1174 struct foo1
1175 @{
1176 char x;
1177 char :0;
1178 char y;
1179 @};
1180
1181 struct foo2
1182 @{
1183 char x;
1184 int :0;
1185 char y;
1186 @};
1187
1188 main ()
1189 @{
1190 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1191 sizeof (struct foo1));
1192 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1193 sizeof (struct foo2));
1194 exit (0);
1195 @}
1196 @end smallexample
1197
1198 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1199 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1200 @end defmac
1201
1202 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1203 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1204 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1205 @end defmac
1206
1207 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1208
1209 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1210
1211 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1212
1213 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1214 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1215 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1216 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1217 @var{specified}.
1218
1219 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1220 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1221 @end defmac
1222
1223 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1224 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1225 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1226 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1227 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1228 (DImode)} is assumed.
1229 @end defmac
1230
1231 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1232 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1233 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1234 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1235 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1236 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1237 having its mode specified.
1238
1239 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1240 would most commonly define this macro if the
1241 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1242 64-bit mode.
1243 @end defmac
1244
1245 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1246 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1247 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1248 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1249
1250 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1251 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1252 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1253 @end defmac
1254
1255 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1256
1257 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1258
1259 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1260
1261 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1270
1271 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1272
1273 @node Type Layout
1274 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1275
1276 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1277 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1278 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1279 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1280
1281 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1282 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1283 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1284 @end defmac
1285
1286 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1287 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1288 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1289 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1290 unit.)
1291 @end defmac
1292
1293 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1294 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1295 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1296 @end defmac
1297
1298 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1299 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1300 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1301 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1302 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1303 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1304 @end defmac
1305
1306 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1307 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1308 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1309 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1310 macro must be at least 64.
1311 @end defmac
1312
1313 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1314 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1315 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1316 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1317 @end defmac
1318
1319 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1320 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1321 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1322 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1323 @end defmac
1324
1325 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1326 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1327 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1328 @end defmac
1329
1330 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1331 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1332 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1333 words.
1334 @end defmac
1335
1336 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1337 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1338 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1339 words.
1340 @end defmac
1341
1342 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1343 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1344 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1345 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1346 @end defmac
1347
1348 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1349 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1350 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1351 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1352 @end defmac
1353
1354 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1355 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1356 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1357 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1358 @end defmac
1359
1360 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1361 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1362 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1363 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1364 @end defmac
1365
1366 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1367 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1368 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1369 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1370 @end defmac
1371
1372 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1373 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1374 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1375 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1376 @end defmac
1377
1378 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1379 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1380 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1381 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1382 @end defmac
1383
1384 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1385 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1386 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1387 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1388 @end defmac
1389
1390 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1391 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1392 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1393 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1394 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1395 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1396 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1397 @end defmac
1398
1399 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1400 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1401 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1402 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1403 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1404 is the default.
1405 @end defmac
1406
1407 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1408 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1409 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1410 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1411 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1412 @end defmac
1413
1414 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1415
1416 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1417 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1418 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1419 contents of the string.
1420
1421 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1422 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1423 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1424 of the data type names defined in the function
1425 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1426 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1427 compiler to crash on startup.
1428
1429 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1430 int"}.
1431 @end defmac
1432
1433 @defmac SIZETYPE
1434 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1435 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1436 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1437 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1438 is extracted.
1439
1440 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1441
1442 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1443 @end defmac
1444
1445 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1446 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1447 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1448 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1449 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1450
1451 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1452 @end defmac
1453
1454 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1455 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1456 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1457 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1458 information.
1459
1460 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1461 @end defmac
1462
1463 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1464 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1465 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1466 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1467 @end defmac
1468
1469 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1470 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1471 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1472 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1473 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1474 information.
1475
1476 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1477 @end defmac
1478
1479 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1480 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1481 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1482 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1483 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1484
1485 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1486 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1487 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1488 @end defmac
1489
1490 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1491 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1492 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1493 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1494 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1495
1496 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1497 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1498 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1499 int}.
1500 @end defmac
1501
1502 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1503 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1504 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1505 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1506 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1507 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1508 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1509 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1510 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1511 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1513 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1514 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1515 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1517 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1519 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1521 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1523 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1525 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1527 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1529 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1530 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1531 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1532 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1533 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1534 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1535 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1536 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1537 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1538 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1539
1540 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1541 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1542 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1543 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1544 these macros are null pointers.
1545 @end defmac
1546
1547 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1548 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1549 that looks like:
1550
1551 @smallexample
1552 struct @{
1553 union @{
1554 void (*fn)();
1555 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1556 @};
1557 ptrdiff_t delta;
1558 @};
1559 @end smallexample
1560
1561 @noindent
1562 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1563 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1564 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1565 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1566 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1567 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1568 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1569 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1570
1571 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1572 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1573 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1574 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1575 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1576 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1577 architecture, you should define this macro to
1578 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1579
1580 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1581 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1582 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1583 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1584 @end defmac
1585
1586 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1587 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1588 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1589 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1590 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1591 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1592 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1593
1594 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1595 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1596 @end defmac
1597
1598 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1599 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1600 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1601 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1602 when special alignment is necessary. */
1603 @end defmac
1604
1605 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1606 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1607 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1608 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1609 of words in each data entry.
1610 @end defmac
1611
1612 @node Registers
1613 @section Register Usage
1614 @cindex register usage
1615
1616 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1617 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1618
1619 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1620 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1621 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1622 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1623 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1624
1625 @menu
1626 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1627 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1628 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1629 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1630 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1631 @end menu
1632
1633 @node Register Basics
1634 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1635
1636 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1637 Registers have various characteristics.
1638
1639 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1640 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1641 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1642 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1643 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1644 @end defmac
1645
1646 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1647 @cindex fixed register
1648 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1649 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1650 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1651 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1652 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1653 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1654 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1655
1656 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1657 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1658 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1659
1660 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1661 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1662 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1663 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1664 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1665 @end defmac
1666
1667 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1668 @cindex call-used register
1669 @cindex call-clobbered register
1670 @cindex call-saved register
1671 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1672 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1673 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1674 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1675 function calls.
1676
1677 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1678 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1679 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1680 @end defmac
1681
1682 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1683 @cindex call-used register
1684 @cindex call-clobbered register
1685 @cindex call-saved register
1686 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1687 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1688 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1689 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1690 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1691 @end defmac
1692
1693 @cindex call-used register
1694 @cindex call-clobbered register
1695 @cindex call-saved register
1696 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1697
1698 @findex fixed_regs
1699 @findex call_used_regs
1700 @findex global_regs
1701 @findex reg_names
1702 @findex reg_class_contents
1703 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1704
1705 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1706 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1707 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1708 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1709 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1710 outbound register.
1711 @end defmac
1712
1713 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1714 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1715 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1716 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1717 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1718 register.
1719 @end defmac
1720
1721 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1722 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1723 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1724 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1725 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1726 gotos.
1727 @end defmac
1728
1729 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1730 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1731 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1732 @end defmac
1733
1734 @node Allocation Order
1735 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1736 @cindex order of register allocation
1737 @cindex register allocation order
1738
1739 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1740 Registers are allocated in order.
1741
1742 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1743 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1744 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1745 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1746
1747 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1748 (all else being equal).
1749
1750 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1751 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1752 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1753 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1754 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1755 @end defmac
1756
1757 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1758 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1759 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1760
1761 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1762 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1763 register; and so on.
1764
1765 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1766 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1767
1768 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1769 @end defmac
1770
1771 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1772 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1773 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1774 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1775 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1776 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1777 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1778 @end defmac
1779
1780 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1781 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1782 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1783 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1784 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1785 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1786 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1787 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1788
1789 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1790 @end defmac
1791
1792 @node Values in Registers
1793 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1794
1795 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1796 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1797 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1798
1799 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1800
1801 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1802 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1803 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1804 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1805 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1806 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1807 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1808
1809 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1810 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1811 nonzero.
1812
1813 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1814 @code{subreg_get_info}
1815 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1816 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1817 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1818 registers and so not be representable.
1819 @end defmac
1820
1821 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1822 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1823 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1824 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1825 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1826 @end defmac
1827
1828 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1829 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1830 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1831 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1832 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1833 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1834 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1835 @end defmac
1836
1837 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1838
1839 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1840 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1841 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1842
1843 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1844 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1845 handler.
1846
1847 The default is always nonzero.
1848 @end defmac
1849
1850 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1851
1852 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1853
1854 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1855 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1856 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1857 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1858 @end defmac
1859
1860 @node Leaf Functions
1861 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1862
1863 @cindex leaf functions
1864 @cindex functions, leaf
1865 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1866 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1867 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1868 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1869 normally arrive.
1870
1871 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1872 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1873 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1874 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1875 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1876 functions''.
1877
1878 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1879 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1880 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1881 accomplish this.
1882
1883 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1884 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1885 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1886 function treatment.
1887
1888 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1889 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1890 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1891 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1892 in this vector.
1893
1894 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1895 the treatment of leaf functions.
1896 @end defmac
1897
1898 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1899 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1900 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1901
1902 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1903 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1904 will cause the compiler to abort.
1905
1906 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1907 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1908 this.
1909 @end defmac
1910
1911 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1912 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1913 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1914 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1915 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1916 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1917 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1918 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1919 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1920 functions which only use leaf registers.
1921 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1922 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1923 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1924 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1925 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1926
1927 @node Stack Registers
1928 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1929
1930 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1931 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1932 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1933 stack.
1934
1935 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1936 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1937 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1938 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1939 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1940 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
1941 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1942
1943 @defmac STACK_REGS
1944 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1945 @end defmac
1946
1947 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1948 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1949 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1950 @end defmac
1951
1952 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1953 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1954 of the stack.
1955 @end defmac
1956
1957 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
1958 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1959 the stack.
1960 @end defmac
1961
1962 @node Register Classes
1963 @section Register Classes
1964 @cindex register class definitions
1965 @cindex class definitions, register
1966
1967 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1968 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1969 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1970 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1971
1972 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1973 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1974 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1975
1976 @findex ALL_REGS
1977 @findex NO_REGS
1978 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1979 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1980 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1981 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1982
1983 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1984 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1985 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1986 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1987 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1988 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1989
1990 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1991 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1992
1993 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1994 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1995 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1996 them in operand constraints.
1997
1998 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
1999 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2000 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2001 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2002 (@pxref{Costs}).
2003
2004 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2005 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2006 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2007 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2008 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2009 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2010 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2011
2012 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2013 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2014 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2015 in their union.
2016
2017 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2018 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2019 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2020 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2021 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2022
2023 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2024 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2025 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2026 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2027 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2028 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2029 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2030 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2031 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2032
2033 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2034 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2035 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2036 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2037 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2038 tells how many classes there are.
2039
2040 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2041 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2042 in many of the tables described below.
2043 @end deftp
2044
2045 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2046 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2047
2048 @smallexample
2049 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2050 @end smallexample
2051 @end defmac
2052
2053 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2054 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2055 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2056 @end defmac
2057
2058 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2059 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2060 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2061 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2062 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2063
2064 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2065 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2066 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2067 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2068 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2069 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2070 so on.
2071 @end defmac
2072
2073 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2074 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2075 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2076 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2077 register.
2078 @end defmac
2079
2080 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2081 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2082 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2083 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2084 @end defmac
2085
2086 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2087 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2088 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2089 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2090 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2091 @end defmac
2092
2093 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2094 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2095 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2096 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2097 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2098 @end defmac
2099
2100 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2101 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2102 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2103 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2104 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2105 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2106 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2107 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2108 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2109 @end defmac
2110
2111 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2112 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2113 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2114 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2115 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2116 @end defmac
2117
2118 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2119 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2120 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2121 @end defmac
2122
2123 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2124 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2125 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2126 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2127 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2128 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2129 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2130 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2131 @code{address_operand}.
2132 @end defmac
2133
2134 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2135 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2136 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2137 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2138 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2139 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2140 than other base register uses.
2141
2142 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2143 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2144 @end defmac
2145
2146 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2147 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2148 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2149 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2150 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2151 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2152 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2153 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2154 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2155 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2156 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2157 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2158 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2159 @end defmac
2160
2161 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2162 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2163 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2164 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2165 allocated such a hard register.
2166
2167 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2168 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2169 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2170 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2171 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2172 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2173 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2174 only if neither labeling works.
2175 @end defmac
2176
2177 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2178
2179 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2180
2181 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2182 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2183 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2184 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2185 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2186 safe:
2187
2188 @smallexample
2189 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2190 @end smallexample
2191
2192 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2193 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2194 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2195 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2196 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2197
2198 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2199 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2200 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2201 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2202 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2203 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2204 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2205 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2206 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2207 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2208 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2209
2210 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2211 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2212 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2213 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2214 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2215 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2216 @end defmac
2217
2218 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2219
2220 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2221 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2222 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2223 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2224 ordinarily be used.
2225
2226 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2227 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2228
2229 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2230 smaller class.
2231
2232 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2233 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2234 @end defmac
2235
2236 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2237
2238 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2239 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2240 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2241 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2242 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2243
2244 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2245 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2246 reload phase that it may
2247 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2248 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2249 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2250 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2251 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2252 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2253
2254 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2255 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2256 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2257 class required. If the
2258 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2259 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2260 macros identically.
2261
2262 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2263 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2264 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2265 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2266 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2267
2268 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2269 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2270 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2271 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2272 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2273 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2274 register.
2275
2276 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2277 register that
2278 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2279 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2280 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2281 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2282 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2283
2284 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2285 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2286 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2287 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2288
2289 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2290 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2291 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2292 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2293 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2294 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2295 general registers.
2296 @end defmac
2297
2298 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2299
2300 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2301 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2302 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2303 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2304 defined by this macro.
2305
2306 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2307 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2308 @end defmac
2309
2310 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2311
2312 @hook TARGET_SELECT_EARLY_REMAT_MODES
2313
2314 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2315
2316 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2317
2318 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2319 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2320 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2321
2322 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2323 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2324 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2325 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2326
2327 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2328 in the reload pass.
2329 @end defmac
2330
2331 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2332
2333 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2334
2335 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2336
2337 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2338
2339 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2340
2341 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2342
2343 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2344
2345 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2346
2347 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2348
2349 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2350
2351 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2352
2353 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2354
2355 @node Stack and Calling
2356 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2357 @cindex calling conventions
2358
2359 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2360 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2361
2362 @menu
2363 * Frame Layout::
2364 * Exception Handling::
2365 * Stack Checking::
2366 * Frame Registers::
2367 * Elimination::
2368 * Stack Arguments::
2369 * Register Arguments::
2370 * Scalar Return::
2371 * Aggregate Return::
2372 * Caller Saves::
2373 * Function Entry::
2374 * Profiling::
2375 * Tail Calls::
2376 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2377 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2378 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2379 @end menu
2380
2381 @node Frame Layout
2382 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2383 @cindex stack frame layout
2384 @cindex frame layout
2385
2386 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2387 Here is the basic stack layout.
2388
2389 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2390 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2391 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2392 @end defmac
2393
2394 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2395 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2396 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2397 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2398
2399 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2400 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2401 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2402 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2403 space for the next item on the stack.
2404
2405 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2406 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2407 which is often wrong.
2408 @end defmac
2409
2410 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2411 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2412 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2413 @end defmac
2414
2415 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2416 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2417 addresses on the stack.
2418 @end defmac
2419
2420 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2421
2422 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2423 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2424 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2425
2426 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2427 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2428 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2429 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2430 @end defmac
2431
2432 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2433 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2434 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2435 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2436
2437 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2438 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2439 @end defmac
2440
2441 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2442 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2443 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2444 function.
2445
2446 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2447 the first argument's address.
2448 @end defmac
2449
2450 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2451 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2452 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2453
2454 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2455 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2456 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2457 @end defmac
2458
2459 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2460 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2461 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2462 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2463 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2464 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2465 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2466 @end defmac
2467
2468 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2469 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2470 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2471 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2472 itself.
2473
2474 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2475 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2476 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2477 @end defmac
2478
2479 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2480 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2481 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2482 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2483 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2484 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2485 @end defmac
2486
2487 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2488
2489 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2490 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2491 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2492 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2493 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2494 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2495 @end defmac
2496
2497 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2498 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2499 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2500 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2501 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2502 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2503
2504 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2505 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2506 determine the return address of other frames.
2507 @end defmac
2508
2509 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2510 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2511 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2512 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2513 @end defmac
2514
2515 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2516 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2517 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2518 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2519 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2520 the stack.
2521
2522 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2523 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2524
2525 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2526 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2527 @end defmac
2528
2529 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2530 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2531 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2532 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2533 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2534
2535 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2536 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2537 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2538 over time.
2539 @end defmac
2540
2541 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2542 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2543 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2544 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2545 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2546 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2547 @end defmac
2548
2549 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2550
2551 @hook TARGET_DWARF_POLY_INDETERMINATE_VALUE
2552
2553 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2554 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2555 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2556 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2557 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2558 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2559
2560 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2561 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2562 @end defmac
2563
2564 @defmac DEFAULT_INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2565 Like @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}, but must be the same for all
2566 functions of the same ABI, and when using GAS @code{.cfi_*} directives
2567 must also agree with the default CFI GAS emits. Define this macro
2568 only if @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} can have different values
2569 between different functions of the same ABI or when
2570 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} does not agree with GAS default CFI.
2571 @end defmac
2572
2573 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2574 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2575 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2576 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2577 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2578 during virtual register instantiation.
2579
2580 The default value for this macro is
2581 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2582 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2583 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2584 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2585 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2586
2587 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2588 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2589 DWARF 2.
2590 @end defmac
2591
2592 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2593 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2594 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2595 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2596 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2597
2598 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2599 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2600 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2601 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2602 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2603 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2604 should be defined.
2605 @end defmac
2606
2607 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2608 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2609 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2610 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2611 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2612 @end defmac
2613
2614 @node Exception Handling
2615 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2616 @cindex exception handling
2617
2618 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2619 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2620 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2621 @var{N} registers are usable.
2622
2623 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2624 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2625 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2626 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2627 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2628
2629 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2630 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2631 @end defmac
2632
2633 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2634 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2635 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2636 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2637 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2638
2639 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2640 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2641
2642 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2643 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2644 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2645 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2646 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2647 that provided by DWARF 2.
2648 @end defmac
2649
2650 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2651 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2652 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2653 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2654
2655 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2656 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2657 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2658 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2659 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2660 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2661 target call frame.
2662
2663 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2664 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2665 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2666
2667 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2668 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2669 @end defmac
2670
2671 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2672 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2673 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2674 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2675 using it to return to the exception handler.
2676 @end defmac
2677
2678 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2679 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2680 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2681 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2682 and so may be read-only.
2683
2684 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2685 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2686 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2687 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2688
2689 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2690 represented directly.
2691 @end defmac
2692
2693 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2694 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2695 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2696 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2697 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2698
2699 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2700 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2701 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2702 to be emitted.
2703 @end defmac
2704
2705 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2706 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2707 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2708 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2709 through signal frames.
2710
2711 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2712 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2713 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2714 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2715 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2716 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2717 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2718 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2719 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2720
2721 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2722 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2723 @end defmac
2724
2725 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2726 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2727 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2728 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2729
2730 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2731 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2732 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2733 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2734 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2735 be updated in @var{fs}.
2736 @end defmac
2737
2738 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2739 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2740 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2741 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2742 @end defmac
2743
2744 @node Stack Checking
2745 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2746
2747 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2748 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2749 three ways:
2750
2751 @enumerate
2752 @item
2753 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2754 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2755 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2756 other special processing.
2757
2758 @item
2759 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2760 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2761 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2762 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2763 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2764 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2765 approach below.
2766
2767 @item
2768 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2769 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2770 @end enumerate
2771
2772 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2773 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2774 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2775 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2776
2777 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2778 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2779 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2780 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2781 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2782 value of this macro is zero.
2783 @end defmac
2784
2785 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2786 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2787 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2788 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2789 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2790 @end defmac
2791
2792 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2793 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2794 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2795 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2796 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2797 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2798 @end defmac
2799
2800 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2801 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2802 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2803 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2804 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2805 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2806 default value of this macro is zero.
2807 @end defmac
2808
2809 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2810 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2811 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2812 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2813 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2814 architectures and operating systems.
2815 @end defmac
2816
2817 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2818 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2819 in the opposite case.
2820
2821 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2822 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2823 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2824 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2825 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2826 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2827 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2828 @end defmac
2829
2830 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2831 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2832 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2833 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2834 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2835 use the default of four words.
2836 @end defmac
2837
2838 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2839 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2840 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2841 @option{-fstack-check}.
2842 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2843 normally not need to override that default.
2844 @end defmac
2845
2846 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_ALLOCA_PROBE_RANGE
2847
2848 @need 2000
2849 @node Frame Registers
2850 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2851
2852 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2853 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2854
2855 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2856 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2857 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2858 the hardware determines which register this is.
2859 @end defmac
2860
2861 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2862 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2863 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2864 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2865 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2866 @end defmac
2867
2868 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2869 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2870 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2871 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2872 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2873 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2874 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2875 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2876 used for the frame pointer.
2877
2878 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2879 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2880 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2881 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2882 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2883 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2884 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2885
2886 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2887 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2888 @end defmac
2889
2890 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2891 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2892 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2893 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2894 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2895 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2896 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2897 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2898 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2899 @end defmac
2900
2901 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2902 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2903 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
2904 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2905 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2906 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2907 @end defmac
2908
2909 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
2910 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2911 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
2912 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
2913 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2914 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2915 @end defmac
2916
2917 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2918 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2919 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2920 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2921 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2922 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2923 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2924
2925 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2926 address from the stack.
2927 @end defmac
2928
2929 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2930 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2931 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2932 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2933 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2934 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2935 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2936 not be defined.
2937
2938 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2939
2940 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2941 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
2942 @end defmac
2943
2944 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
2945
2946 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2947 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
2948 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
2949 DWARF2 exception handling.
2950
2951 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
2952 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
2953 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
2954 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
2955 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
2956 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
2957 registers that are not call-saved.
2958
2959 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2960 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
2961 @end defmac
2962
2963 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2964
2965 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
2966 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
2967
2968 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2969 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
2970 @end defmac
2971
2972 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
2973
2974 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2975 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
2976 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
2977 column number to use instead.
2978 @end defmac
2979
2980 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
2981
2982 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2983 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
2984 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
2985 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
2986 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
2987
2988 @end defmac
2989
2990 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
2991
2992 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
2993 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
2994 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
2995 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
2996 return @code{@var{regno}}.
2997
2998 @end defmac
2999
3000 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3001
3002 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3003 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3004 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3005 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3006
3007 @end defmac
3008
3009 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3010
3011 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3012 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3013 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3014 defined and 0 otherwise.
3015
3016 @end defmac
3017
3018 @defmac DWARF_LAZY_REGISTER_VALUE (@var{regno}, @var{value})
3019 Define this macro if the target has pseudo DWARF registers whose
3020 values need to be computed lazily on demand by the unwinder (such as when
3021 referenced in a CFA expression). The macro returns true if @var{regno}
3022 is such a register and stores its value in @samp{*@var{value}} if so.
3023 @end defmac
3024
3025 @node Elimination
3026 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3027
3028 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3029 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3030
3031 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3032
3033 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3034 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3035 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3036
3037 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3038 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3039
3040 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3041 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3042 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3043 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3044 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3045
3046 In this case, you might specify:
3047 @smallexample
3048 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3049 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3050 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3051 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3052 @end smallexample
3053
3054 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3055 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3056 @end defmac
3057
3058 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3059
3060 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3061 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3062 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3063 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3064 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3065 @end defmac
3066
3067 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3068
3069 @node Stack Arguments
3070 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3071 @cindex arguments on stack
3072 @cindex stack arguments
3073
3074 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3075 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3076 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3077
3078 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3079
3080 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3081 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3082 outgoing arguments.
3083 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3084 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3085 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3086 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3087 @end defmac
3088
3089 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3090 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3091 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3092 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3093 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3094 @end defmac
3095
3096 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3097 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3098 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3099
3100 On some machines, the definition
3101
3102 @smallexample
3103 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3104 @end smallexample
3105
3106 @noindent
3107 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3108 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3109 alignment. Then the definition should be
3110
3111 @smallexample
3112 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3113 @end smallexample
3114
3115 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3116 @end defmac
3117
3118 @findex outgoing_args_size
3119 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3120 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3121 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3122 will be computed and placed into
3123 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3124 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3125 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3126
3127 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3128 is not proper.
3129 @end defmac
3130
3131 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3132 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3133 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3134 registers.
3135
3136 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3137 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3138 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3139 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3140 of the function.
3141
3142 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3143 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3144 which.
3145 @end defmac
3146 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3147 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3148
3149 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3150 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3151 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3152 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3153 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3154 @end defmac
3155
3156 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3157 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3158 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3159 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3160 if the function called is a library function.
3161
3162 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3163 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3164 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3165 @end defmac
3166
3167 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3168 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3169 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3170 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3171 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3172
3173 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3174 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3175 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3176 stack in its natural location.
3177 @end defmac
3178
3179 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3180
3181 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3182 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3183 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3184 when compiling a function call.
3185
3186 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3187 have been accumulated.
3188
3189 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3190 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3191 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3192 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3193 appropriate.
3194 @end defmac
3195
3196 @node Register Arguments
3197 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3198 @cindex arguments in registers
3199 @cindex registers arguments
3200
3201 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3202 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3203 the stack.
3204
3205 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3206
3207 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3208
3209 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3210
3211 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3212
3213 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3214
3215 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3216
3217 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3218
3219 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3220
3221 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3222 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3223 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3224 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3225 of bytes of argument so far.
3226
3227 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3228 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3229 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3230 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3231 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3232 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3233 @end defmac
3234
3235 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3236 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3237 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3238 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3239 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3240 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3241 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3242 @end defmac
3243
3244 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3245 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3246 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3247 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3248 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3249 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3250 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3251 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3252 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3253 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3254 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3255 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3256 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3257
3258 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3259 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3260 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3261 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3262 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3263 never both of them at once.
3264 @end defmac
3265
3266 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3267 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3268 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3269 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3270 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3271 0)} is used instead.
3272 @end defmac
3273
3274 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3275 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3276 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3277 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3278
3279 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3280 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3281 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3282 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3283 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3284 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3285 @end defmac
3286
3287 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3288
3289 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3290
3291 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3292
3293 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3294 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3295 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3296 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3297 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3298 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3299 @end defmac
3300
3301 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3302 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3303 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3304 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3305 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3306 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3307 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3308 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3309 required.
3310 @end defmac
3311
3312 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3313
3314 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3315
3316 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3317 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3318 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3319 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3320 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3321 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3322 stack.
3323 @end defmac
3324
3325 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3326
3327 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3328
3329 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3330
3331 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3332
3333 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3334
3335 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3336
3337 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3338
3339 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3340
3341 @hook TARGET_TRANSLATE_MODE_ATTRIBUTE
3342
3343 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3344
3345 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3346
3347 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE
3348
3349 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3350
3351 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3352
3353 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3354
3355 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3356
3357 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3358
3359 @node Scalar Return
3360 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3361 @cindex return values in registers
3362 @cindex values, returned by functions
3363 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3364
3365 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3366 values---values that can fit in registers.
3367
3368 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3369
3370 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3371 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3372 a new target instead.
3373 @end defmac
3374
3375 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3376 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3377 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3378
3379 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3380 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3381 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3382 compiled.
3383 @end defmac
3384
3385 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3386
3387 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3388 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3389 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3390
3391 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3392 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3393 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3394 suffices:
3395
3396 @smallexample
3397 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3398 @end smallexample
3399
3400 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3401 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3402 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3403
3404 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3405 for a new target instead.
3406 @end defmac
3407
3408 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3409
3410 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3411 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3412 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3413 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3414 @end defmac
3415
3416 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3417
3418 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3419
3420 @node Aggregate Return
3421 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3422 @cindex aggregates as return values
3423 @cindex large return values
3424 @cindex returning aggregate values
3425 @cindex structure value address
3426
3427 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3428 cases), the value is not returned according to
3429 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3430 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3431 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3432 address}.
3433
3434 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3435 memory.
3436
3437 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3438
3439 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3440 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3441 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3442 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3443 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3444 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3445 target hook.
3446
3447 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3448 @end defmac
3449
3450 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3451
3452 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3453 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3454 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3455 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3456
3457 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3458 pass an address to the subroutine.
3459
3460 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3461 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3462 @end defmac
3463
3464 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3465
3466 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3467
3468 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3469
3470 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3471
3472 @node Caller Saves
3473 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3474
3475 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3476 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3477 must live across calls.
3478
3479 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3480 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3481 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3482 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3483 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3484 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3485 @end defmac
3486
3487 @node Function Entry
3488 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3489 @cindex function entry and exit
3490 @cindex prologue
3491 @cindex epilogue
3492
3493 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3494 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3495
3496 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3497
3498 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3499
3500 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3501
3502 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3503
3504 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3505
3506 @itemize @bullet
3507 @item
3508 @findex pretend_args_size
3509 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3510 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3511 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3512 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3513 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3514 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3515 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3516 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3517 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3518 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3519
3520 @item
3521 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3522 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3523 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3524 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3525 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3526 a save area.
3527
3528 @item
3529 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3530 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3531 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3532 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3533
3534 @item
3535 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3536 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3537 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3538 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3539 @end itemize
3540
3541 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3542 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3543 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3544 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3545 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3546 default is 0.
3547
3548 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3549 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3550 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3551 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3552 @end defmac
3553
3554 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3555 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3556 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3557 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3558 @end defmac
3559
3560 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3561 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3562 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3563 on entry to an exception edge.
3564 @end defmac
3565
3566 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3567
3568 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3569
3570 @node Profiling
3571 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3572 @cindex profiling, code generation
3573
3574 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3575
3576 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3577 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3578 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3579
3580 @findex mcount
3581 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3582 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3583 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3584 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3585
3586 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3587 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3588 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3589 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3590 @end defmac
3591
3592 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3593 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3594 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3595 not support profiling.
3596 @end defmac
3597
3598 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3599 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3600 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3601 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3602 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3603 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3604 @end defmac
3605
3606 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3607 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3608 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3609 @end defmac
3610
3611 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3612
3613 @node Tail Calls
3614 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3615 @cindex tail calls
3616
3617 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3618
3619 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3620
3621 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3622
3623 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3624
3625 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3626 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3627 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3628
3629 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3630 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3631 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3632 up the static chain, etc.
3633
3634 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3635 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3636 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3637 independent parts of GCC.
3638
3639 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3640 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3641 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3642 paths where this would unnecessary.
3643
3644 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3645 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3646 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3647 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3648 generic code.
3649
3650 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3651
3652 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3653
3654 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3655
3656 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3657
3658 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3659
3660 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3661
3662 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3663 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3664 @cindex stack smashing protection
3665
3666 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3667
3668 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3669
3670 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3671
3672 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3673
3674 @hook TARGET_GET_VALID_OPTION_VALUES
3675
3676 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3677 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3678 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3679
3680 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3681
3682 @node Varargs
3683 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3684 @cindex varargs implementation
3685
3686 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3687 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3688 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3689 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3690 conditionals to include it.
3691
3692 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3693 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3694 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3695 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3696 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3697 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3698
3699 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3700 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3701 below.
3702
3703 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3704 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3705 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3706 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3707 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3708
3709 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3710 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3711 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3712 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3713
3714 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3715 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3716 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3717 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3718 to use them for its own purposes.
3719 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3720 @c 10feb93
3721 @end defmac
3722
3723 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3724 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3725 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3726 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3727 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3728 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3729 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3730 of the current function.
3731 @end defmac
3732
3733 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3734 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3735 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3736 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3737 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3738 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3739
3740 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3741 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3742 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3743
3744 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3745 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3746 @end defmac
3747
3748 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3749
3750 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3751
3752 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3753
3754 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3755
3756 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3757
3758 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3759
3760 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3761
3762 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3763
3764 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3765
3766 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3767
3768 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3769
3770 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3771
3772 @node Trampolines
3773 @section Support for Nested Functions
3774 @cindex support for nested functions
3775 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3776 @cindex descriptors for nested functions
3777 @cindex nested functions, support for
3778
3779 Taking the address of a nested function requires special compiler
3780 handling to ensure that the static chain register is loaded when
3781 the function is invoked via an indirect call.
3782
3783 GCC has traditionally supported nested functions by creating an
3784 executable @dfn{trampoline} at run time when the address of a nested
3785 function is taken. This is a small piece of code which normally
3786 resides on the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.
3787 The trampoline loads the static chain register and then jumps to the
3788 real address of the nested function.
3789
3790 The use of trampolines requires an executable stack, which is a
3791 security risk. To avoid this problem, GCC also supports another
3792 strategy: using descriptors for nested functions. Under this model,
3793 taking the address of a nested function results in a pointer to a
3794 non-executable function descriptor object. Initializing the static chain
3795 from the descriptor is handled at indirect call sites.
3796
3797 On some targets, including HPPA and IA-64, function descriptors may be
3798 mandated by the ABI or be otherwise handled in a target-specific way
3799 by the back end in its code generation strategy for indirect calls.
3800 GCC also provides its own generic descriptor implementation to support the
3801 @option{-fno-trampolines} option. In this case runtime detection of
3802 function descriptors at indirect call sites relies on descriptor
3803 pointers being tagged with a bit that is never set in bare function
3804 addresses. Since GCC's generic function descriptors are
3805 not ABI-compliant, this option is typically used only on a
3806 per-language basis (notably by Ada) or when it can otherwise be
3807 applied to the whole program.
3808
3809 Define the following hook if your backend either implements ABI-specified
3810 descriptor support, or can use GCC's generic descriptor implementation
3811 for nested functions.
3812
3813 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3814
3815 The following macros tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and
3816 initialize an executable trampoline. You can also use this interface
3817 if your back end needs to create ABI-specified non-executable descriptors; in
3818 this case the "trampoline" created is the descriptor containing data only.
3819
3820 The instructions in an executable trampoline must do two things: load
3821 a constant address into the static chain register, and jump to the real
3822 address of the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k,
3823 this requires two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the
3824 two addresses exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.
3825 On RISC machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a
3826 register in two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate
3827 immediate operands.
3828
3829 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3830 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3831 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3832 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3833 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3834 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3835 separately.
3836
3837 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3838
3839 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3840 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3841 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3842 @end defmac
3843
3844 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3845 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3846 @end defmac
3847
3848 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3849 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3850
3851 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3852 is used for aligning trampolines.
3853 @end defmac
3854
3855 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3856
3857 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3858
3859 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3860 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3861 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3862 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3863
3864 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3865 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3866 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3867 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3868 latter makes initialization faster.
3869
3870 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3871 the following macro.
3872
3873 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3874 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3875 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3876 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3877 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3878 @end defmac
3879
3880 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3881 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3882 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3883 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3884 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3885
3886 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3887 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3888 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3889 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3890 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3891
3892 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3893 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3894 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3895 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3896 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3897 special assembler code.
3898 @end defmac
3899
3900 @node Library Calls
3901 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3902 @cindex library subroutine names
3903 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3904
3905 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3906 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3907
3908 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3909 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3910 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3911 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3912 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3913 @end defmac
3914
3915 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3916 @findex init_one_libfunc
3917 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3918
3919 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3920
3921 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3922 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3923 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3924 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3925 return a tristate.
3926
3927 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3928 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3929 don't need to define this macro.
3930 @end defmac
3931
3932 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
3933 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
3934 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
3935 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
3936 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
3937 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
3938 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
3939 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
3940 @end defmac
3941
3942 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
3943 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
3944 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3945 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
3946 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3947 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
3948 @end defmac
3949
3950 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3951 @findex matherr
3952 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
3953 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3954 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
3955 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3956 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3957 system.
3958
3959 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3960 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3961 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3962 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3963 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3964 @end defmac
3965
3966 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3967 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3968 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3969 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3970 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3971 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3972 @end defmac
3973
3974 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
3975
3976 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
3977 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
3978 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
3979 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
3980 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
3981 the NeXT runtime installed.
3982
3983 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
3984 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
3985 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
3986
3987 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
3988 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
3989 @end defmac
3990
3991 @node Addressing Modes
3992 @section Addressing Modes
3993 @cindex addressing modes
3994
3995 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3996 This is about addressing modes.
3997
3998 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
3999 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4000 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4001 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4002 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4003 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4004 @end defmac
4005
4006 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4007 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4008 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4009 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4010 the size of the memory operand.
4011 @end defmac
4012
4013 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4014 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4015 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4016 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4017 @end defmac
4018
4019 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4020 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4021 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4022 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4023 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4024 constant addresses are supported.
4025 @end defmac
4026
4027 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4028 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4029 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4030 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4031 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4032 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4033 @end defmac
4034
4035 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4036 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4037 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4038 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4039 accept.
4040 @end defmac
4041
4042 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4043
4044 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4045 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4046 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4047 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4048 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4049 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4050 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4051 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4052 @code{'m'} constraint.
4053 @end defmac
4054
4055 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4056 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4057 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4058 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4059 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4060
4061 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4062 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4063
4064 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4065 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4066 @end defmac
4067
4068 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4069
4070 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4071 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4072 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4073 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4074 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4075 performance reasons.
4076
4077 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4078 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4079 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4080 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4081 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4082 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4083 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4084 be shared.
4085
4086 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4087 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4088 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4089 of reload internals.
4090
4091 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4092 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4093 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4094
4095 @findex push_reload
4096 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4097 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4098 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4099
4100 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4101 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4102 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4103 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4104 @code{push_reload}.
4105
4106 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4107 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4108 the address has become legitimate.
4109
4110 @findex copy_rtx
4111 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4112 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4113 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4114 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4115 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4116 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4117 @end defmac
4118
4119 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4120
4121 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4122
4123 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4124
4125 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4126
4127 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4128
4129 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4130
4131 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4132
4133 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4134
4135 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4136
4137 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4138
4139 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4140
4141 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4142
4143 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST
4144
4145 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4146
4147 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4148
4149 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4150
4151 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4152
4153 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4154
4155 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SPLIT_REDUCTION
4156
4157 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4158
4159 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4160
4161 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_EMPTY_MASK_IS_EXPENSIVE
4162
4163 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4164
4165 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4166
4167 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4168
4169 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4170
4171 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4172
4173 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4174
4175 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4176
4177 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4178
4179 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4180
4181 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4182
4183 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4184
4185 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4186
4187 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4188
4189 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4190
4191 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_ELSE_VALUE
4192
4193 @node Anchored Addresses
4194 @section Anchored Addresses
4195 @cindex anchored addresses
4196 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4197
4198 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4199 For example, if we have:
4200
4201 @smallexample
4202 static int a, b, c;
4203 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4204 @end smallexample
4205
4206 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4207 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4208 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4209 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4210 be something like:
4211
4212 @smallexample
4213 int foo (void)
4214 @{
4215 register int *xr = &x;
4216 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4217 @}
4218 @end smallexample
4219
4220 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4221 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4222
4223 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4224 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4225 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4226 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4227
4228 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4229
4230 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4231
4232 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4233
4234 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4235
4236 @node Condition Code
4237 @section Condition Code Status
4238 @cindex condition code status
4239
4240 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4241 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4242
4243 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4244 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4245 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4246 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4247 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4248 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4249 most RISC machines.
4250
4251 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4252 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4253 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4254 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4255 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4256 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4257
4258 These restrictions can prevent important
4259 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4260 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4261 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4262 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4263 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4264
4265 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4266 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4267 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4268 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4269 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4270 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4271 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4272
4273 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4274 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4275 interested in most macros in this section.
4276
4277 @menu
4278 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4279 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4280 @end menu
4281
4282 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4283 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4284 @findex cc0
4285
4286 @findex cc_status
4287 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4288 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4289 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4290 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4291 currently based, and several standard flags.
4292
4293 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4294 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4295 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4296
4297 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4298 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4299 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4300
4301 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4302 @end defmac
4303
4304 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4305 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4306 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4307 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4308 define this macro to initialize it.
4309
4310 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4311 @end defmac
4312
4313 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4314 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4315 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4316 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4317 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4318 set @code{(cc0)}.
4319
4320 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4321
4322 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4323 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4324 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4325 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4326 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4327 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4328 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4329 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4330 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4331 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4332 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4333 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4334 condition code value.
4335
4336 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4337 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4338 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4339 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4340 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4341 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4342 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4343
4344 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4345 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4346 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4347 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4348 @end defmac
4349
4350 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4351 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4352 @findex CCmode
4353 @findex MODE_CC
4354
4355 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4356 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4357 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4358 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4359 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4360 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4361 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4362 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4363 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4364 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4365 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4366
4367 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4368 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4369 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4370 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4371 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4372 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4373 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4374
4375 @smallexample
4376 (define_insn ""
4377 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4378 (compare:CCNZ
4379 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4380 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4381 (const_int 0)))]
4382 ""
4383 "@dots{}")
4384 @end smallexample
4385
4386 @noindent
4387 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4388 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4389
4390 @smallexample
4391 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4392 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4393 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4394 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4395 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4396 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4397 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4398 @end smallexample
4399
4400 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4401 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4402 this section.
4403
4404 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4405 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4406 @end defmac
4407
4408 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4409
4410 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4411 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4412 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4413 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4414 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4415
4416 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4417 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4418 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4419 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4420
4421 @smallexample
4422 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4423 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4424 @end smallexample
4425 @end defmac
4426
4427 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4428 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4429 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4430 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4431 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4432 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4433 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4434 like:
4435
4436 @smallexample
4437 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4438 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4439 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4440 @end smallexample
4441 @end defmac
4442
4443 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4444
4445 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4446
4447 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4448
4449 @node Costs
4450 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4451 @cindex costs of instructions
4452 @cindex relative costs
4453 @cindex speed of instructions
4454
4455 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4456 on the target machine.
4457
4458 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4459 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4460 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4461 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4462 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4463 that.
4464
4465 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4466 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4467 registers if they are not general registers.
4468
4469 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4470 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4471 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4472 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4473 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4474 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4475
4476 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4477 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4478 @end defmac
4479
4480 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4481
4482 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4483 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4484 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4485 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4486 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4487 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4488 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4489
4490 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4491 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4492 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4493 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4494 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4495 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4496
4497 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4498 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4499 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4500 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4501 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4502 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4503 are the same as to this macro.
4504
4505 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4506 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4507 @end defmac
4508
4509 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4510
4511 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4512 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4513 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4514 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4515 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4516 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4517 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4518 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4519 @end defmac
4520
4521 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4522 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4523 ordinarily expect.
4524
4525 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4526 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4527 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4528 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4529 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4530 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4531
4532 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4533 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4534 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4535 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4536 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4537 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4538 @end defmac
4539
4540 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4541
4542 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4543 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4544 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4545 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4546 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4547
4548 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4549 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4550 the number of such sequences.
4551
4552 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4553 optimized for speed rather than size.
4554
4555 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4556 @end defmac
4557
4558 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4559
4560 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4561
4562 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4563 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4564 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4565 @end defmac
4566
4567 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4568 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4569 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4570 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4571 @end defmac
4572
4573 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4574 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4575 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4576 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4577 @end defmac
4578
4579 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4580 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4581 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4582 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4583 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4584
4585 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4586 optimized for speed rather than size.
4587
4588 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4589 @end defmac
4590
4591 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4592 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4593 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4594 a block set insn or a library call.
4595 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4596 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4597
4598 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4599 optimized for speed rather than size.
4600
4601 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4602 @end defmac
4603
4604 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4605 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4606 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4607 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4608 @end defmac
4609
4610 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4611 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4612 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4613 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4614 @end defmac
4615
4616 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4617 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4618 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4619 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4620 @end defmac
4621
4622 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4623 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4624 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4625 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4626 @end defmac
4627
4628 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4629 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4630 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4631 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4632 @end defmac
4633
4634 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4635 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4636 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4637 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4638 @end defmac
4639
4640 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4641 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4642 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4643 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4644 @end defmac
4645
4646 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4647 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4648 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4649 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4650 @end defmac
4651
4652 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4653 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4654 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4655 @end defmac
4656
4657 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4658 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4659 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4660 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4661 @end defmac
4662
4663 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4664
4665 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4666
4667 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4668
4669 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4670
4671 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4672
4673 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4674
4675 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4676
4677 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4678
4679 @node Scheduling
4680 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4681
4682 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4683 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4684 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4685 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4686
4687 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4688
4689 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4690
4691 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4692
4693 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4694
4695 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4696
4697 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4698
4699 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4700
4701 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4702
4703 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4704
4705 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4706
4707 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4708
4709 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4710
4711 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4712
4713 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4714
4715 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4716
4717 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4718
4719 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4720
4721 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4722
4723 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4724
4725 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4726
4727 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4728
4729 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4730
4731 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4732
4733 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4734
4735 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4736
4737 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4738
4739 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4740
4741 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4742
4743 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4744
4745 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4746
4747 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4748
4749 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4750
4751 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4752
4753 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4754
4755 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4756
4757 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4758
4759 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4760
4761 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4762
4763 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4764
4765 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4766
4767 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4768
4769 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4770
4771 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4772
4773 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4774
4775 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4776
4777 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4778
4779 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4780
4781 @node Sections
4782 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4783 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4784 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4785
4786 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4787 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4788 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4789 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4790 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4791 of sections.
4792
4793 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4794 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4795 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4796 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4797 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4798 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4799 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4800
4801 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4802 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4803 to be string literals.
4804
4805 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4806 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4807 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4808 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4809
4810 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4811 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4812 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4813 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4814 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4815 reuse @code{text_section}.
4816
4817 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4818 if the target does not provide them.
4819
4820 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4821 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4822 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4823 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4824 @end defmac
4825
4826 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4827 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4828 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4829 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4830 @end defmac
4831
4832 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4833 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4834 executed functions in the program.
4835 @end defmac
4836
4837 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4838 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4839 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4840 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4841 @end defmac
4842
4843 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4844 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4845 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4846 initialized, writable small data.
4847 @end defmac
4848
4849 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4850 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4851 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4852 data.
4853 @end defmac
4854
4855 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4856 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4857 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4858 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4859 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4860 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4861 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4862 used.
4863 @end defmac
4864
4865 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4866 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4867 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4868 uninitialized, writable small data.
4869 @end defmac
4870
4871 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4872 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4873 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4874 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4875 @end defmac
4876
4877 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4878 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4879 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4880 default is @code{'T'}.
4881 @end defmac
4882
4883 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4884 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4885 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4886 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4887 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4888 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4889 @end defmac
4890
4891 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4892 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4893 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4894 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4895 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4896 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4897 @end defmac
4898
4899 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4900 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4901 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4902 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4903 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4904 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4905 @end defmac
4906
4907 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4908 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4909 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4910 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4911 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4912 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4913 @end defmac
4914
4915 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4916 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4917 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4918 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4919 @end defmac
4920
4921 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4922 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4923 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4924 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4925 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4926 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4927 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4928 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4929 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4930 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4931 @end defmac
4932
4933 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4934 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4935 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4936 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4937 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4938 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4939 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4940 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4941 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4942 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4943 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4944 @end defmac
4945
4946 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4947 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4948 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4949 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4950 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4951 @end defmac
4952
4953 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4954 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4955 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4956 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4957 readonly data section is used.
4958
4959 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4960 @end defmac
4961
4962 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4963
4964 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4965
4966 @hook TARGET_ASM_GENERATE_PIC_ADDR_DIFF_VEC
4967
4968 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4969
4970 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
4971 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
4972 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
4973
4974 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
4975 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
4976 it is unlikely to be called.
4977 @end defmac
4978
4979 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
4980
4981 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
4982
4983 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
4984
4985 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
4986
4987 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4988
4989 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
4990
4991 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4992
4993 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4994
4995 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
4996
4997 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
4998
4999 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5000
5001 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5002
5003 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5004
5005
5006 @node PIC
5007 @section Position Independent Code
5008 @cindex position independent code
5009 @cindex PIC
5010
5011 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5012 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5013 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5014 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5015 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5016 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5017 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5018 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5019 relative addresses.
5020 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5021 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5022
5023 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5024 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5025 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5026 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5027 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5028 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5029 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5030 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5031 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5032 @end defmac
5033
5034 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5035 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5036 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5037 the default is zero. Do not define
5038 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5039 @end defmac
5040
5041 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5042 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5043 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5044 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5045 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5046 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5047 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5048 position independent code.
5049 @end defmac
5050
5051 @node Assembler Format
5052 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5053
5054 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5055 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5056 instructions do.
5057
5058 @menu
5059 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5060 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5061 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5062 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5063 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5064 and termination routines.
5065 * Macros for Initialization::
5066 Specific macros that control the handling of
5067 initialization and termination routines.
5068 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5069 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5070 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5071 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5072 @end menu
5073
5074 @node File Framework
5075 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5076 @cindex assembler format
5077 @cindex output of assembler code
5078
5079 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5080 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5081
5082 @findex default_file_start
5083 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5084
5085 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5086
5087 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5088
5089 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5090
5091 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5092 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5093 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5094 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5095 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5096 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5097 this function.
5098 @end deftypefun
5099
5100 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5101
5102 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5103
5104 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5105
5106 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5107 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5108 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5109 the end of the line.
5110 @end defmac
5111
5112 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5113 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5114 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5115 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5116 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5117 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5118 @end defmac
5119
5120 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5121 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5122 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5123 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5124 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5125 @end defmac
5126
5127 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5128 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5129 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5130 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5131
5132 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5133 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5134 @end defmac
5135
5136 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5137
5138 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5139
5140 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5141 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5142 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5143 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5144 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5145 of the filename using this macro.
5146 @end defmac
5147
5148 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5149
5150 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5151
5152 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5153
5154 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5155
5156 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5157 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5158 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5159 @end deftypevr
5160
5161 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5162 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5163
5164 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5165
5166 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5167
5168 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5169
5170 @need 2000
5171 @node Data Output
5172 @subsection Output of Data
5173
5174
5175 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5176
5177 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5178
5179 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5180
5181 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5182
5183 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5184 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5185 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5186 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5187 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5188
5189 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5190 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5191 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5192 @end defmac
5193
5194 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5195 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5196 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5197 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5198 @end defmac
5199
5200 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5201 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5202 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5203 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5204 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5205 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5206 pool before the function.
5207 @end defmac
5208
5209 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5210 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5211 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5212 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5213 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5214 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5215 immediately after this call.
5216
5217 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5218 not be defined.
5219 @end defmac
5220
5221 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5222 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5223 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5224 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5225
5226 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5227 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5228 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5229 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5230 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5231 alignment.
5232
5233 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5234 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5235 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5236 Here is how to do this:
5237
5238 @smallexample
5239 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5240 @end smallexample
5241
5242 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5243 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5244 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5245
5246 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5247 @end defmac
5248
5249 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5250 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5251 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5252 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5253 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5254 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5255
5256 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5257 define this macro.
5258 @end defmac
5259
5260 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5261 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5262 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5263 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5264 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5265
5266 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5267 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5268 @end defmac
5269
5270 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5271
5272 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5273 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5274
5275 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5276 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5277 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5278 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5279 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5280 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5281 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5282 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5283 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5284 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5285 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5286 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5287 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5288 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5289 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5290 on the host machine.
5291
5292 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5293 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5294 machine's memory.
5295 @end defmac
5296
5297 @node Uninitialized Data
5298 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5299
5300 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5301 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5302
5303 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5304 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5305 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5306 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5307 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5308 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5309 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5310 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5311 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5312 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5313 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5314 an ordinary undefined external.
5315
5316 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5317 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5318 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5319
5320 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5321 common global variables are output.
5322 @end defmac
5323
5324 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5325 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5326 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5327 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5328 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5329 as the number of bits.
5330 @end defmac
5331
5332 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5333 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5334 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5335 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5336 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5337 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5338 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5339 @end defmac
5340
5341 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5342 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5343 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5344 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5345 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5346
5347 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5348 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5349 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5350 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5351 the name, and a newline.
5352
5353 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5354 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5355 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5356 You do not need to do both.
5357
5358 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5359 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5360 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5361 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5362 common in order to save space in the object file.
5363 @end defmac
5364
5365 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5366 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5367 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5368 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5369 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5370
5371 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5372 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5373 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5374
5375 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5376 static variables are output.
5377 @end defmac
5378
5379 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5380 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5381 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5382 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5383 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5384 as the number of bits.
5385 @end defmac
5386
5387 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5388 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5389 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5390 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5391 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5392 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5393 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5394 @end defmac
5395
5396 @node Label Output
5397 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5398
5399 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5400 This is about outputting labels.
5401
5402 @findex assemble_name
5403 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5404 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5405 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5406 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5407 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5408 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5409 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5410 @end defmac
5411
5412 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5413 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5414 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5415 a function.
5416 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5417 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5418 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5419 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5420
5421 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5422 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5423 @end defmac
5424
5425 @findex assemble_name_raw
5426 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5427 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5428 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5429 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5430 that it is more efficient.
5431 @end defmac
5432
5433 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5434 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5435 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5436 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5437 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5438
5439 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5440 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5441 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5442 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5443 define this macro.
5444 @end defmac
5445
5446 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5447 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5448 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5449 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5450 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5451 provided.
5452 @end defmac
5453
5454 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5455 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5456 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5457 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5458 address.
5459
5460 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5461 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5462 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5463 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5464 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5465 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5466 @end defmac
5467
5468 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5469 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5470 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5471 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5472 @samp{.} is used instead.
5473 @end defmac
5474
5475 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5476 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5477 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5478 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5479 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5480 @end defmac
5481
5482 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5483 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5484 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5485 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5486 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5487
5488 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5489 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5490 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5491 types at all, do not define this macro.
5492 @end defmac
5493
5494 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5495 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5496 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5497 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5498 the default is not to define this macro.
5499
5500 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5501 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5502 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5503 types at all, do not define this macro.
5504 @end defmac
5505
5506 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5507 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5508 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5509 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5510 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5511 you should not count on this.
5512
5513 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5514 definition of this macro is provided.
5515 @end defmac
5516
5517 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5518 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5519 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5520 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5521 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5522 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5523 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5524
5525 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5526 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5527
5528 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5529 of this macro.
5530 @end defmac
5531
5532 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5533 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5534 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5535 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5536 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5537 representing the function.
5538
5539 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5540
5541 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5542 of this macro.
5543 @end defmac
5544
5545 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5546 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5547 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5548 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5549 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5550 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5551 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5552
5553 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5554 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5555
5556 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5557 of this macro.
5558 @end defmac
5559
5560 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5561 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5562 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5563 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5564 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5565 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5566
5567 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5568
5569 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5570 of this macro.
5571 @end defmac
5572
5573 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5574 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5575 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5576 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5577 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5578 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5579
5580 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5581 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5582
5583 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5584 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5585 @end defmac
5586
5587 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5588
5589 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5590 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5591 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5592 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5593
5594 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5595 nothing.
5596 @end defmac
5597
5598 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5599 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5600 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5601 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5602 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5603 something about the size of the object.
5604
5605 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5606 nothing.
5607
5608 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5609 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5610 @end defmac
5611
5612 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5613
5614 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5615
5616 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5617
5618 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5619 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5620 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5621 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5622 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5623 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5624 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5625 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5626
5627 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5628 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5629 macro.
5630 @end defmac
5631
5632 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5633 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5634 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5635 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5636 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5637 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5638 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5639 to make @var{name} weak.
5640 @end defmac
5641
5642 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5643 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5644 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5645 declaration of @code{name}.
5646 @end defmac
5647
5648 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5649 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5650 supports weak symbols.
5651
5652 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5653 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5654 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5655 @end defmac
5656
5657 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5658 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5659
5660 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5661 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5662 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5663 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5664 @end defmac
5665
5666 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5667 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5668 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5669 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5670 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5671 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5672 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5673 @end defmac
5674
5675 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5676 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5677 semantics.
5678
5679 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5680 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5681 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5682 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5683 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5684 be emitted as one-only.
5685 @end defmac
5686
5687 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5688
5689 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5690 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5691 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5692 The default is @code{0}.
5693
5694 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5695 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5696 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5697 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5698 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5699 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5700 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5701
5702 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5703 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5704 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5705 table of contents.
5706 @end defmac
5707
5708 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5709 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5710 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5711 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5712 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5713 declaration.
5714
5715 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5716 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5717 @end defmac
5718
5719 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5720
5721 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5722
5723 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5724 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5725 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5726 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5727 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5728 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5729 @end defmac
5730
5731 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5732
5733 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5734 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5735 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5736 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5737 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5738 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5739 @end defmac
5740
5741 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5742 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5743 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5744 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5745 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5746 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5747 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5748 being taken.
5749 @end defmac
5750
5751 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5752
5753 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5754 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5755 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5756 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5757 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5758 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5759 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5760 bundles.
5761
5762 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5763 used.
5764 @end defmac
5765
5766 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5767 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5768 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5769
5770 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5771 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5772 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5773
5774 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5775 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5776 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5777 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5778 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5779 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5780 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5781 @end defmac
5782
5783 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5784 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5785 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5786 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5787 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5788
5789 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5790 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5791 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5792 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5793 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5794 internal static variables in different scopes.
5795
5796 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5797 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5798 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5799 between the name and the number will suffice.
5800
5801 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5802 which is correct for most systems.
5803 @end defmac
5804
5805 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5806 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5807 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5808
5809 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5810 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5811 correct for most systems.
5812 @end defmac
5813
5814 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5815 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5816 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5817 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5818 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5819 the tree nodes are available.
5820
5821 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5822 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5823 correct for most systems.
5824 @end defmac
5825
5826 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5827 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5828 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5829 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5830 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5831 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5832 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5833 @end defmac
5834
5835 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5836 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5837 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5838 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5839 an undefined weak symbol.
5840
5841 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5842 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5843 @end defmac
5844
5845 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5846 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5847 Objective-C methods.
5848
5849 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5850 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5851 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5852 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5853
5854 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5855 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5856 systems define other ways of computing names.
5857
5858 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5859 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5860 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5861 50 characters extra.
5862
5863 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5864 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5865 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5866 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5867
5868 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5869 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5870 @end defmac
5871
5872 @node Initialization
5873 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5874 @cindex initialization routines
5875 @cindex termination routines
5876 @cindex constructors, output of
5877 @cindex destructors, output of
5878
5879 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5880 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5881 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5882 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5883 @code{main} is called.
5884
5885 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5886 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5887 terminates.
5888
5889 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5890 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5891 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5892 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5893
5894 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5895 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5896 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5897
5898 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5899 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5900 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5901 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5902 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5903
5904 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5905 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5906 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5907 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5908 pointer containing zero.
5909
5910 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5911 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5912 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5913 list; destructors in forward order.
5914
5915 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5916 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5917 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5918 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5919 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5920 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5921 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5922 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5923
5924 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5925 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5926 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5927 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5928 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5929
5930 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5931 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5932 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5933 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5934 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5935
5936 @smallexample
5937 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5938 @end smallexample
5939
5940 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5941 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5942 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5943 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5944 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5945
5946 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5947 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5948 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5949 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5950 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5951 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5952
5953 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5954 macro properly.
5955
5956 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5957 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5958 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5959 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5960 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5961 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5962
5963 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5964 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5965 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5966 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5967 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5968 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5969 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5970 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5971 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5972 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5973 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5974 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5975 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5976 the initialization process.
5977
5978 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5979 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5980 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5981 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5982 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5983 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5984 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5985 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5986 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5987 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5988 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5989
5990 @ifinfo
5991 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5992 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5993 @end ifinfo
5994
5995 @node Macros for Initialization
5996 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5997
5998 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5999 and termination functions:
6000
6001 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6002 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6003 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6004 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6005 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6006 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6007 run the initialization functions.
6008 @end defmac
6009
6010 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6011 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6012 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6013 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6014 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6015 @end defmac
6016
6017 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6018 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6019 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6020 @end defmac
6021
6022 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6023 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6024 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6025 @end defmac
6026
6027 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6028 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6029 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6030 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6031 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6032 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6033
6034 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6035 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6036 exception tables embedded in the code.
6037 @end defmac
6038
6039 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6040 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6041 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6042 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6043 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6044 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6045 @end defmac
6046
6047 @defmac INVOKE__main
6048 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6049 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6050 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6051 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6052 @end defmac
6053
6054 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6055 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6056 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6057 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6058 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6059 @end defmac
6060
6061 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6062
6063 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6064
6065 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6066
6067 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6068 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6069
6070 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6071 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6072 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6073
6074 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6075 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6076
6077 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6078 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6079 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6080 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6081
6082 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6083 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6084 @end defmac
6085
6086 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6087 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6088 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6089 @command{nm}.
6090 @end defmac
6091
6092 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6093 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6094 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6095 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6096 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6097 produces.
6098 @end defmac
6099
6100 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6101 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6102 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6103 termination functions in shared libraries:
6104
6105 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6106 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6107 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6108 @end defmac
6109
6110 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6111 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6112 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6113 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6114 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6115 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6116 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6117 @end defmac
6118
6119 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6120 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6121 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6122 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6123 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6124 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6125 @end defmac
6126
6127 @node Instruction Output
6128 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6129
6130 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6131 This describes assembler instruction output.
6132
6133 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6134 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6135 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6136 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6137 @end defmac
6138
6139 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6140 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6141 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6142 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6143 to registers using alternate names.
6144 @end defmac
6145
6146 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6147 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6148 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6149 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6150 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6151 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6152 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6153 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6154
6155 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6156 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6157 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6158 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6159 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6160 @end defmac
6161
6162 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6163 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6164 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6165
6166 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6167 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6168 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6169 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6170 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6171 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6172 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6173 so that it will not be output twice.
6174
6175 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6176 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6177 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6178 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6179 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6180
6181 @findex recog_data.operand
6182 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6183 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6184
6185 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6186 in the usual way.
6187 @end defmac
6188
6189 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6190 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6191 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6192 they will be output differently.
6193
6194 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6195 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6196 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6197 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6198 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6199 by changing the contents of the vector.
6200
6201 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6202 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6203 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6204 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6205 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6206 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6207
6208 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6209 @end defmac
6210
6211 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6212
6213 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6214 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6215 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6216 RTL expression.
6217
6218 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6219 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6220 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6221 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6222 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6223 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6224 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6225
6226 @findex reg_names
6227 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6228 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6229 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6230 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6231
6232 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6233 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6234 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6235 @var{code}.
6236 @end defmac
6237
6238 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6239 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6240 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6241 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6242 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6243 in this way.
6244 @end defmac
6245
6246 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6247 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6248 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6249 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6250
6251 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6252 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6253 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6254 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6255 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6256 Format}.
6257 @end defmac
6258
6259 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6260 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6261 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6262 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6263 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6264 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6265 or whatever.
6266
6267 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6268 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6269 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6270 @end defmac
6271
6272 @findex final_sequence
6273 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6274 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6275 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6276 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6277 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6278 being output.
6279
6280 @findex asm_fprintf
6281 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6282 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6283 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6284 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6285 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6286 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6287 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6288 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6289 files can define these macros differently.
6290 @end defmac
6291
6292 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6293 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6294 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6295 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6296 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6297 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6298 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6299 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6300 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6301 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6302 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6303 @end defmac
6304
6305 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6306 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6307 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6308 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6309 first variant.
6310
6311 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6312 @smallexample
6313 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6314 @end smallexample
6315 @noindent
6316 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6317 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6318 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6319 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6320 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6321 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6322 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6323 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6324 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6325
6326 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6327 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6328 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6329
6330 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6331 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6332 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6333 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6334 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6335 opcodes or operand order.
6336 @end defmac
6337
6338 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6339 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6340 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6341 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6342 profiling.
6343 @end defmac
6344
6345 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6346 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6347 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6348 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6349 profiling.
6350 @end defmac
6351
6352 @node Dispatch Tables
6353 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6354
6355 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6356 This concerns dispatch tables.
6357
6358 @cindex dispatch table
6359 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6360 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6361 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6362 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6363 definitions of these labels are output using
6364 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6365 way here. For example,
6366
6367 @smallexample
6368 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6369 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6370 @end smallexample
6371
6372 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6373 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6374 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6375 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6376 mode and flags can be read.
6377 @end defmac
6378
6379 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6380 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6381 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6382
6383 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6384 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6385 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6386 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6387 For example,
6388
6389 @smallexample
6390 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6391 @end smallexample
6392 @end defmac
6393
6394 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6395 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6396 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6397 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6398 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6399 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6400
6401 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6402 for the table.
6403
6404 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6405 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6406 @end defmac
6407
6408 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6409 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6410 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6411 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6412 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6413 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6414 of the preceding label.
6415
6416 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6417 the jump-table.
6418 @end defmac
6419
6420 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6421
6422 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6423
6424 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6425
6426 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6427
6428 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6429
6430 @node Exception Region Output
6431 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6432
6433 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6434
6435 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6436 region.
6437
6438 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6439 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6440 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6441 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6442 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6443
6444 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6445 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6446 @end defmac
6447
6448 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6449 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6450 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6451 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6452
6453 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6454 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6455 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6456 be marked as not to be collected.
6457 @end defmac
6458
6459 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6460 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6461 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6462 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6463 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6464 @end defmac
6465
6466 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6467 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6468 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6469 @end defmac
6470
6471 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6472 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6473 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6474 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6475 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6476 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6477 @end defmac
6478
6479 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6480 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6481 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6482 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6483 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6484 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6485 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6486
6487 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6488 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6489 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6490
6491 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6492 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6493 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6494 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6495 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6496 depending on this setting.
6497
6498 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6499 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6500 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6501 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6502 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6503 @end deftypefn
6504
6505 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6506 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6507 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6508 command-line option processing.
6509 @end deftypevr
6510
6511 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6512 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6513 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6514 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6515 @end defmac
6516
6517 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6518 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6519 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6520 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6521 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6522 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6523 @end defmac
6524
6525 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6526 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6527 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6528 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6529 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6530 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6531 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6532 @end defmac
6533
6534 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6535
6536 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6537
6538 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6539
6540 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6541
6542 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6543
6544 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6545
6546 @node Alignment Output
6547 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6548
6549 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6550 This describes commands for alignment.
6551
6552 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6553 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6554 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6555
6556 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6557 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6558 define the macro.
6559
6560 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6561 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6562 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6563 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6564 @end defmac
6565
6566 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6567 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6568 a @code{BARRIER}.
6569
6570 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6571 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6572 define the macro.
6573 @end defmac
6574
6575 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6576 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6577 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6578
6579 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6580 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6581 define the macro.
6582
6583 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6584 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6585 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6586 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6587 @end defmac
6588
6589 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6590 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6591 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6592 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6593
6594 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6595 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6596 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6597 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6598 @end defmac
6599
6600 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6601 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6602 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6603 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6604 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6605 @end defmac
6606
6607 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6608 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6609 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6610 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6611 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6612 section.
6613 @end defmac
6614
6615 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6616 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6617 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6618 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6619 @end defmac
6620
6621 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6622 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6623 for padding, if necessary.
6624 @end defmac
6625
6626 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6627 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6628 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6629 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6630 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6631 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6632 @end defmac
6633
6634 @need 3000
6635 @node Debugging Info
6636 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6637
6638 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6639 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6640
6641 @menu
6642 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6643 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6644 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6645 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6646 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6647 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6648 @end menu
6649
6650 @node All Debuggers
6651 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6652
6653 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6654 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6655
6656 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6657 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6658 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6659 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6660 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6661 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6662 compiler and another for DBX@.
6663
6664 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6665 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6666 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6667 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6668 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6669
6670 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6671 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6672 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6673 @end defmac
6674
6675 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6676 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6677 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6678 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6679 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6680 that produce debugging output for DBX and allow the frame-pointer to be
6681 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6682 @end defmac
6683
6684 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6685 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6686 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6687 @var{offset}.
6688 @end defmac
6689
6690 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6691 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6692 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6693 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6694 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6695 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6696 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6697
6698 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6699 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6700 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6701 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6702 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6703
6704 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6705 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6706 @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6707 @end defmac
6708
6709 @node DBX Options
6710 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6711
6712 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6713 These are specific options for DBX output.
6714
6715 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6716 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6717 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6718 @end defmac
6719
6720 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6721 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6722 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6723 @end defmac
6724
6725 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6726 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6727 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6728 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6729 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6730 if there is any occasion to.
6731 @end defmac
6732
6733 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6734 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6735 in the text section.
6736 @end defmac
6737
6738 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6739 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6740 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6741 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6742 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6743 @end defmac
6744
6745 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6746 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6747 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6748 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6749 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6750 information format.
6751 @end defmac
6752
6753 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6754 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6755 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6756 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6757 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6758 @end defmac
6759
6760 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6761 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6762 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6763 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6764 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6765 @end defmac
6766
6767 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6768 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6769 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6770 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6771 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6772 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6773 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6774 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6775 @end defmac
6776
6777 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6778 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6779 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6780 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6781 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6782 if backslash is correct for your system.
6783 @end defmac
6784
6785 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6786 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6787 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6788 variable.
6789 @end defmac
6790
6791 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6792 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6793 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6794 @end defmac
6795
6796 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6797 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6798 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6799 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6800 @end defmac
6801
6802 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6803 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6804 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6805 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6806 @end defmac
6807
6808 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6809 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6810 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6811 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6812 @end defmac
6813
6814 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6815 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6816 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6817 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6818 code.
6819 @end defmac
6820
6821 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6822 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6823 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6824 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6825 an absolute address.
6826 @end defmac
6827
6828 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6829 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6830 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6831 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6832 @end defmac
6833
6834 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6835 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6836 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6837 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6838 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6839 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6840 number for a type number.
6841 @end defmac
6842
6843 @node DBX Hooks
6844 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6845
6846 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6847 These are hooks for DBX format.
6848
6849 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6850 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6851 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6852 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6853 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6854 unique labels in the assembly output.
6855
6856 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6857 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6858 @end defmac
6859
6860 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6861 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6862 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6863 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6864 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6865 @end defmac
6866
6867 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6868 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6869 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6870 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6871 @end defmac
6872
6873 @node File Names and DBX
6874 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6875
6876 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6877 This describes file names in DBX format.
6878
6879 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6880 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6881 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6882 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6883 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6884
6885 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6886 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6887
6888 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6889 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6890 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6891 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6892 @end defmac
6893
6894 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6895 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6896 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6897 the beginning of the file.
6898 @end defmac
6899
6900 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6901 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6902 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6903 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6904 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6905 @end defmac
6906
6907 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6908 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6909 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6910 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6911
6912 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6913 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6914 @end defmac
6915
6916 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6917 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6918 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6919 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6920 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6921 @end defmac
6922
6923 @need 2000
6924 @node DWARF
6925 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6926
6927 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6928 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6929
6930 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6931 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6932 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6933
6934 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6935
6936 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6937 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6938 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6939 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6940 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6941 @end defmac
6942
6943 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6944 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6945 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6946 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6947 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6948 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6949 @end defmac
6950
6951 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6952
6953 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6954 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6955 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6956 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6957 @end defmac
6958
6959 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_VIEW_DEBUG_INFO
6960 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler supports view
6961 assignment and verification in @code{.loc}. If it does not, but the
6962 user enables location views, the compiler may have to fallback to
6963 internal line number tables.
6964 @end defmac
6965
6966 @hook TARGET_RESET_LOCATION_VIEW
6967
6968 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6969
6970 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6971
6972 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6973
6974 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6975
6976 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6977 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6978 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6979 @end defmac
6980
6981 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6982 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6983 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6984 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6985 @end defmac
6986
6987 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
6988 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6989 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
6990 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
6991 given @var{section}.
6992 @end defmac
6993
6994 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6995 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
6996 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6997 @end defmac
6998
6999 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7000 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7001 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7002 @end defmac
7003
7004 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7005 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7006 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7007 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7008 is referenced by a function.
7009 @end defmac
7010
7011 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7012
7013 @need 2000
7014 @node VMS Debug
7015 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7016
7017 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7018 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7019
7020 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7021 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7022 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7023 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7024 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7025 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7026 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7027 @end defmac
7028
7029 @node Floating Point
7030 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7031 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7032 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7033
7034 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7035 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7036 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7037 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7038 doing the compilation.
7039
7040 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7041 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7042 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7043 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7044 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7045 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7046 target floating point formats are identical.
7047
7048 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7049 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7050 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7051 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7052
7053 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7054 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7055 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7056 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7057 quantity.
7058 @end defmac
7059
7060 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7061 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7062 @end deftypefn
7063
7064 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7065 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7066 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7067 @end deftypefn
7068
7069 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7070 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7071 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7072 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7073 defined by the C language for both.
7074 @end deftypefn
7075
7076 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7077 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7078 @end deftypefn
7079
7080 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7081 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7082 @end deftypefn
7083
7084 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7085 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7086 @end deftypefn
7087
7088 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7089 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7090 @end deftypefn
7091
7092 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7093 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7094 @end deftypefn
7095
7096 @node Mode Switching
7097 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7098 @cindex mode switching
7099 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7100
7101 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7102 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7103 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7104
7105 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7106 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7107 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7108 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7109 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7110 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
7111 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7112
7113 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7114 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7115 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7116 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7117 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7118 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7119 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7120 are optional.
7121 @end defmac
7122
7123 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7124 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7125 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7126 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7127 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7128 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7129 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7130 entity in question.
7131 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7132 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7133 switch is needed / supplied.
7134 @end defmac
7135
7136 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7137
7138 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7139
7140 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7141
7142 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7143
7144 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7145
7146 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7147
7148 @node Target Attributes
7149 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7150 @cindex target attributes
7151 @cindex machine attributes
7152 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7153
7154 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7155 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7156 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7157
7158 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7159
7160 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7161
7162 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7163
7164 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7165
7166 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7167
7168 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7169
7170 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7171
7172 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7173 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7174 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7175 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7176 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7177 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7178 on this implementation detail.
7179 @end defmac
7180
7181 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7182
7183 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7184
7185 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7186
7187 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7188
7189 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7190
7191 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7192
7193 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7194
7195 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7196
7197 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7198
7199 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7200
7201 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7202
7203 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7204
7205 @node Emulated TLS
7206 @section Emulating TLS
7207 @cindex Emulated TLS
7208
7209 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7210 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7211 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7212 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7213 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7214 layer.
7215
7216 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7217 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7218 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7219 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7220
7221 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7222
7223 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7224
7225 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7226
7227 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7228
7229 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7230
7231 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7232
7233 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7234
7235 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7236
7237 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7238
7239 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7240
7241 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7242 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7243 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7244
7245 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7246 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7247 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7248 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7249
7250 @smallexample
7251 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7252 unsigned int d;
7253
7254 d = cp0count + 3;
7255 @end smallexample
7256
7257 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7258 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7259 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7260
7261 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7262 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7263 later in the function.
7264
7265 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7266 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7267 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7268
7269 @node PCH Target
7270 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7271 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7272
7273 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7274
7275 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7276
7277 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7278
7279 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7280
7281 @node C++ ABI
7282 @section C++ ABI parameters
7283 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7284
7285 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7300
7301 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7302
7303 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7304
7305 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7306
7307 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7308
7309 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7310
7311 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7312
7313 @node Named Address Spaces
7314 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7315 @cindex named address spaces
7316
7317 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7318 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7319 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7320 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7321 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7322 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7323 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7324 @code{const} type attributes.
7325
7326 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7327 pointers to the generic address space.
7328
7329 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7330 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7331 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7332 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7333 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7334 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7335 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7336 always 32 bits).
7337
7338 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7339 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7340 address space.
7341
7342 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7343 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7344 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7345 named address space #1:
7346 @smallexample
7347 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7348 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7349 @end smallexample
7350
7351 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7352
7353 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7354
7355 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7356
7357 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7358
7359 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7360
7361 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7362
7363 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7364
7365 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7366
7367 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7368
7369 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7370
7371 @node Misc
7372 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7373 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7374
7375 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7376 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7377
7378 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7379 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7380 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7381 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7382 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7383 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7384 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7385 @end defmac
7386
7387 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7388 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7389 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7390 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7391 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7392 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7393 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7394 @end defmac
7395
7396 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7397 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7398 elements of a jump-table should have.
7399 @end defmac
7400
7401 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7402 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7403 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7404 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7405 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7406 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7407 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7408 flags can be updated.
7409 @end defmac
7410
7411 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7412 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7413 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7414 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7415 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7416 is in effect.
7417 @end defmac
7418
7419 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7420
7421 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7422 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7423 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register. To be
7424 more explicit, if you start with a pair of @code{word_mode} registers with
7425 known values and you do a subword, for example @code{QImode}, addition on
7426 the low part of the registers, then the compiler may consider that the
7427 result has a known value in @code{word_mode} too if the macro is defined
7428 to 1. Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7429 @end defmac
7430
7431 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7432
7433 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7434 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7435 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7436 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7437 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7438 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7439 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7440 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7441
7442 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7443 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7444 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7445 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7446 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7447
7448 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7449 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7450 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7451 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7452 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7453
7454 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7455 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7456 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7457 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7458 @end defmac
7459
7460 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7461 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7462 extends.
7463 @end defmac
7464
7465 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7466
7467 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7468 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7469 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7470 @end defmac
7471
7472 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7473 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7474 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7475 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7476 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7477 at run-time.
7478 @end defmac
7479
7480 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7481 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7482 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7483 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7484 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7485 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7486 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7487 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7488 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7489 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7490 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7491
7492 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7493 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7494 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7495
7496 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7497 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7498 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7499 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7500 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7501
7502 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7503 @end defmac
7504
7505 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7506 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7507
7508 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7509
7510 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7511
7512 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7513 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7514 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7515 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7516 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7517 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7518
7519 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7520 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7521 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7522 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7523 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7524 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7525 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7526 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7527 the compiler.
7528
7529 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7530 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7531 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7532 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7533 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7534 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7535 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7536 expression
7537
7538 @smallexample
7539 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7540 @end smallexample
7541
7542 @noindent
7543 can be converted to
7544
7545 @smallexample
7546 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7547 @end smallexample
7548
7549 @noindent
7550 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7551 tested into the sign bit.
7552
7553 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7554 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7555 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7556 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7557 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7558 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7559
7560 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7561 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7562 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7563 to be used:
7564
7565 @itemize @bullet
7566 @item
7567 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7568 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7569 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7570 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7571 combine the normalization with other operations.
7572
7573 @item
7574 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7575 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7576 other machines.
7577
7578 @item
7579 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7580 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7581 others.
7582
7583 @item
7584 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7585 @end itemize
7586
7587 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7588 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7589 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7590 those cases, e.g., one matching
7591
7592 @smallexample
7593 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7594 @end smallexample
7595
7596 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7597 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7598 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7599 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7600 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7601 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7602 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7603 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7604
7605 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7606 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7607 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7608 @end defmac
7609
7610 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7611 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7612 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7613 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7614 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7615 this macro.
7616 @end defmac
7617
7618 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7619 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7620 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7621 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7622 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7623 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7624 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7625 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7626 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7627 given mode.
7628 @end defmac
7629
7630 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7631 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7632 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7633 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7634 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7635 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7636 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7637 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7638 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7639 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7640 this value.
7641
7642 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7643 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7644
7645 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7646 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7647 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7648 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7649
7650 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7651 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7652 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7653 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7654 breaking the API@.
7655 @end defmac
7656
7657 @defmac Pmode
7658 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7659 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7660 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7661 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7662 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7663
7664 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7665 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7666 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7667 to @code{Pmode}.
7668 @end defmac
7669
7670 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7671 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7672 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7673 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7674 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7675 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7676 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7677 @end defmac
7678
7679 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7680 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7681 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7682 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7683 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7684 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7685
7686 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7687 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7688 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7689 @end defmac
7690
7691 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7692
7693 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7694
7695 @defmac SYSTEM_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7696 Define this macro if the system header files do not support C++@.
7697 This macro handles system header files by pretending that system
7698 header files are enclosed in @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7699 @end defmac
7700
7701 @findex #pragma
7702 @findex pragma
7703 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7704 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7705 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7706 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7707 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7708 setup required for the pragmas.
7709
7710 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7711 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7712 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7713
7714 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7715 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7716
7717 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7718 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7719 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7720 @end defmac
7721
7722 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7723 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7724
7725 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7726 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7727 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7728 pragma of the form
7729
7730 @smallexample
7731 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7732 @end smallexample
7733
7734 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7735 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7736 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7737 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7738 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7739 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7740 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7741 arguments of pragmas registered with
7742 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7743 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7744
7745 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7746 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7747 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7748 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7749 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7750 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7751 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7752 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7753 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7754 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7755 how to build this object file.
7756 @end deftypefun
7757
7758 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7759 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7760 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7761 @end defmac
7762
7763 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7764 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7765 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7766 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7767 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7768 @end defmac
7769
7770 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7771 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7772 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7773 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7774 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7775 @end defmac
7776
7777 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7778 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7779 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7780 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7781 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7782 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7783 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7784 you should define this macro.
7785
7786 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7787 @end defmac
7788
7789 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7790 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7791 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7792 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7793 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7794 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7795 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7796 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7797 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7798 slot of @var{insn}.
7799
7800 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7801 @end defmac
7802
7803 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7804 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7805 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7806 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7807 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7808 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7809
7810 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7811 @end defmac
7812
7813 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7814
7815 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7816 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7817 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7818 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7819 separate math library.
7820
7821 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7822 @end defmac
7823
7824 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7825 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7826 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7827
7828 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7829 is wrong.
7830 @end defmac
7831
7832 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7833 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7834 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7835 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7836 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7837 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7838 for cross-profiling.
7839 @end defmac
7840
7841 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7842
7843 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7844 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7845 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7846 1 if it does use cc0.
7847 @end defmac
7848
7849 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7850 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7851 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7852 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7853 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7854 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7855 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7856 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7857 @end defmac
7858
7859 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7860 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7861 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7862 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7863 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7864 @end defmac
7865
7866 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7867 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7868 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7869 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7870 about the currently processed blocks.
7871 @end defmac
7872
7873 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7874 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7875 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7876 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7877 to by @var{ce_info}.
7878 @end defmac
7879
7880 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7881 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7882 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7883 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7884 to by @var{ce_info}.
7885 @end defmac
7886
7887 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7888 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7889 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7890 to by @var{ce_info}.
7891 @end defmac
7892
7893 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7894
7895 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7896
7897 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7898
7899 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7900
7901 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7902
7903 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7904
7905 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7906
7907 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7908
7909 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7910
7911 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7912
7913 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7914
7915 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7916
7917 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7918
7919 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7920
7921 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7922
7923 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7924
7925 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7926
7927 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7928
7929 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7930 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7931 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7932 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7933 @end defmac
7934
7935 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7936 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7937 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7938 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7939 executable files.
7940 @end defmac
7941
7942 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7943 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7944 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
7945 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
7946 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
7947 lists.
7948 @end defmac
7949
7950 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
7951 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
7952 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
7953 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
7954 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
7955 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
7956 defined as this expression:
7957
7958 @smallexample
7959 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
7960 build_tree_list
7961 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
7962 NULL))
7963 @end smallexample
7964 @end defmac
7965
7966 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
7967
7968 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
7969
7970 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
7971
7972 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
7973
7974 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
7975
7976 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
7977
7978 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
7979
7980 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
7981 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
7982 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
7983 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
7984 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
7985 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
7986 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
7987 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
7988 @end defmac
7989
7990 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7991 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7992 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
7993 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
7994 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
7995 @end deftypefn
7996
7997 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
7998 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
7999 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8000 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8001 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8002 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8003 @end deftypefn
8004
8005 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8006 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8007 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8008 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8009 that are different from @option{-I}.
8010 @end deftypefn
8011
8012 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8013 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8014 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8015 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8016 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8017 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8018 @end defmac
8019
8020 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8021 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8022 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8023 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8024 @end defmac
8025
8026 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8027 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8028 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8029 @end defmac
8030
8031 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8032 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8033 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8034 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8035 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8036 @end defmac
8037
8038 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8039 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8040 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8041 @end defmac
8042
8043 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8044 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8045 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8046 and scanf formatter settings.
8047 @end defmac
8048
8049 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8050
8051 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8052
8053 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8054
8055 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8056
8057 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8058
8059 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8060
8061 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8062 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8063 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8064 @end defmac
8065
8066 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8067 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8068 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8069 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8070 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8071 @end defmac
8072
8073 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8074
8075 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8076
8077 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8078
8079 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8080
8081 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8082
8083 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8084
8085 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8086
8087 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8088
8089 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8090
8091 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8092
8093 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8094
8095 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8096
8097 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8098
8099 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8100 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8101 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8102 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8103 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8104 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8105 representation.
8106
8107 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8108 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8109 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8110 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8111 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8112
8113 @itemize @bullet
8114 @item
8115 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8116 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8117 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8118
8119 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8120 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8121 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8122 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8123 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8124 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8125 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8126 not really a large change.
8127
8128 @item
8129 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8130 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8131 port in this code.
8132
8133 @item
8134 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8135 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8136 @end itemize
8137
8138 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8139 maintainer is familiar with.
8140
8141 @end defmac
8142
8143 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8144
8145 @hook TARGET_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8146
8147 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS